TOA | RC-03 | manual | TOA RC-03 User manual

TOA RC-03 User manual
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
DIGITAL MIXER AMPLIFIER 2x240W MX-6224D
REMOTE CONTROLLER
RC-03
MX-6224D
Thank you for purchasing TOA's Digital Mixer Amplifier 2x240W and Remote Controller.
Please carefully follow the instructions in this manual to ensure long, trouble-free use of your equipment.
133-02-00236-02
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .............................................................................. 3
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................... 4
3. FEATURES . ........................................................................................................... 4
4. Recommended System ......................................................................... 5
5. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ....................................................................... 6
6. Installation PRECAUTIONS ............................................................. 6
7. Nomenclature AND FUNCTIONS .................................................. 7
7.1. MX-6224D Digital Mixer Amplifier 2x240W ............................................................ 7
7.2. RC-03 Remote Controller .................................................................................... 10
8. Connection Example . ........................................................................ 11
9. CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................ 12
9.1. Microphone Connections .....................................................................................
9.2. External Auxiliary Equipment Connections .........................................................
9.3. External Effector Connections .............................................................................
9.4. Monitor Speaker Connections .............................................................................
9.5. External Speaker Processor Connections . .........................................................
9.6. Speaker Connections ..........................................................................................
9.7. Extension Power Amplifier Connections ..............................................................
9.8. RC-03 Remote Controller Connections ...............................................................
13
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
10. SETTINGS ......................................................................................................... 19
10.1. Microphone Equalizer Settings . ......................................................................... 19
10.2. Effector Settings ................................................................................................ 19
10.3. Speaker Equalizer Settings . .............................................................................. 21
11. OPERATIONS .................................................................................................. 22
11.1. Making Broadcasts ............................................................................................. 22
11.2. Using Sleep Mode .............................................................................................. 24
11.3. Switching the AC Power OFF ............................................................................. 25
12. RACK MOUNTING ....................................................................................... 26
13. TROUBLE SHOOTING .............................................................................. 27
14. BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................................................................................ 28
15. SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 29
16. DIMENSIONAL DIAGRAM ...................................................................... 30
16.1. MX-6224D . ......................................................................................................... 30
16.2. RC-03 ................................................................................................................ 30
2
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Before installation or use, be sure to carefully read all the instructions in this section for correct and safe
operation.
• Be sure to follow all the precautionary instructions in this section, which contain important warnings and/or
cautions regarding safety.
• After reading, keep this manual handy for future reference.
Safety Symbol and Message Conventions
Safety symbols and messages described below are used in this manual to prevent bodily injury and property
damage which could result from mishandling. Before operating your product, read this manual first and
understand the safety symbols and messages so you are thoroughly aware of the potential safety hazards.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if mishandled, could
result in death or serious personal injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if mishandled, could
result in moderate or minor personal injury, and/or property damage.
WARNING
• Laite on liitettävä suojakoskettimilla varustettuun
pistorasiaan
• Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt
When Installing the Unit
• Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag
• Do not expose the unit to rain or an environment
where it may be splashed by water or other liquids,
as doing so may result in fire or electric shock.
When the Unit is in Use
• Use the unit only with the voltage specified on
the unit. Using a voltage higher than that which is
specified may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not cut, kink, otherwise damage nor modify
the power supply cord. In addition, avoid using the
power cord in close proximity to heaters, and never
place heavy objects -- including the unit itself -- on
the power cord, as doing so may result in fire or
electric shock.
• Be sure to replace the unit's terminal cover after
connection completion. Because the voltage of up
to 100 V is applied to the high impedance speaker
terminals, never touch these terminals to avoid
electric shock.
• Avoid installing or mounting the unit in unstable
locations, such as on a rickety table or a slanted
surface. Doing so may result in the unit falling
down and causing personal injury and/or property
damage.
• Since the unit is designed for indoor use, do not
install it outdoors. If installed outdoors, the aging of
parts causes the unit to fall off, resulting in personal
injury. Also, when it gets wet with rain, there is a
danger of electric shock.
• Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt
med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens
jord.
• Should the following irregularity be found during
use, immediately switch off the power, disconnect
the power supply plug from the AC outlet and
contact your nearest TOA dealer. Make no further
attempt to operate the unit in this condition as this
may cause fire or electric shock.
· If you detect smoke or a strange smell coming
from the unit.
· If water or any metallic object gets into the unit
· If the unit falls, or the unit case breaks
· If the power supply cord is damaged (exposure of
the core, disconnection, etc.)
· If it is malfunctioning (no tone sounds.)
• To prevent a fire or electric shock, never open nor
remove the unit case as there are high voltage
components inside the unit. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
• Do not place cups, bowls, or other containers of
liquid or metallic objects on top of the unit. If they
accidentally spill into the unit, this may cause a fire
or electric shock.
• Do not insert nor drop metallic objects or flammable
materials in the ventilation slots of the unit's cover,
as this may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not touch a power supply plug during thunder
and lightning, as this may result in electric shock.
3
CAUTION
· Rack-mounting screws are not supplied with the
unit. Prepare them that are appropriate for the
equipment rack.
When Installing the Unit
When the Unit is in Use
• Never plug in nor remove the power supply plug
with wet hands, as doing so may cause electric
shock.
• Make sure that the volume control is set to minimum
position before power is switched on. Loud noise
produced at high volume when power is switched
on can impair hearing.
• When unplugging the power supply cord, be sure to
grasp the power supply plug; never pull on the cord
itself. Operating the unit with a damaged power
supply cord may cause a fire or electric shock.
• When moving the unit, be sure to remove its power
supply cord from the wall outlet. Moving the unit
with the power cord connected to the outlet may
cause damage to the power cord, resulting in fire or
electric shock. When removing the power cord, be
sure to hold its plug to pull.
• Do not block the ventilation slots in the unit's cover.
Doing so may cause heat to build up inside the
unit and result in fire. Also, periodically clean the
ventilation slots of dust.
• Avoid installing the unit in humid or dusty locations,
in locations exposed to the direct sunlight, near the
heaters, or in locations generating sooty smoke
or steam as doing otherwise may result in fire or
electric shock.
• To avoid electric shocks, be sure to switch off the
unit's power when connecting speakers.
• Be sure to follow the instructions below when rackmounting the unit. Failure to do so may cause a fire
or personal injury.
· Install the equipment rack on a stable, hard floor.
Fix it with anchor bolts or take other arrangements
to prevent it from falling down.
· When connecting the unit's power cord to an AC
outlet, use the AC outlet with current capacity
allowable to the unit.
• Switch OFF the unit's power before turning the
phantom power switch ON or OFF. Operating
the switch without switching OFF the main power
could result in a large transient noise through the
speakers, potentially resulting in speaker failure.
• Avoid using phantom power when connecting an
unbalanced microphone to the MIC 1 input, as the
microphone fails.
• Do not connect any other equipment than the RC03 Remote Controller to the MX-6224D’s Remote
controller connection port.
If other equipment, such as a PC, hub or network
device, is connected to that port, the connected
equipment could be damaged.
• Do not operate the unit for an extended period of
time with the sound distorting. Doing so may cause
the connected speakers to heat, resulting in a fire.
• Contact your TOA dealer as to the cleaning. If dust is
allowed to accumulate in the unit over a long period
of time, a fire or damage to the unit may result.
• If dust accumulates on the power supply plug or
in the wall AC outlet, a fire may result. Clean it
periodically. In addition, insert the plug in the wall
outlet securely.
• Switch off the power, and unplug the power supply
plug from the AC outlet for safety purposes when
cleaning or leaving the unit unused for 10 days or
more. Doing otherwise may cause a fire or electric
shock.
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The MX-6224D Dual 240W Mixer Power Amplifier is designed for 2-zone Public address system suitable for
small to middle sized mosques application.
The optional RC-03 Remote Controller exclusively designed for use in conjunction with the MX-6224D permits
ON/OFF control of speaker zones and sound effect function.
3. FEATURES
4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dual 240 W digital amplifier.
6 Microphone inputs and 2 AUX inputs.
Independent input and output volume controls.
Tone controls (Low, Middle and High).
Speaker equalizer preset for BS-1030 and TC-631M/651M
DSP multi-effect (4 types of Dome, Hall, Plate, and Delay)
RC-03 Remote Controller connection
Desktop and rack mountable design
4. Recommended System
DM-1300
Dynamic Microphones
EM-410
Electret condenser
Microphone
To AC mains
MX-6224D
CD Player
BS-1030B
Box speaker x 4
DM-1300
Dynamic Microphones
TC-631M
Horn speaker x 4
Ways of using MIC 2 − 4 and 5 − 6 are shown below as a guideline:
Mic 5 and 6
MIC 2: Mount on a high microphone stand.
MIC 3: Mount on a medium-height microphone stand.
MIC 4: Mount on a low microphone stand.
5
5. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
• The supplied power supply cord is designed to be used exclusively with the unit. Do not connect it to any other
equipment.
• Install the unit in locations where the temperature is between 0 and 40 °C and the moisture is between 35 and
80% (no dew condensation must be formed).
• The unit is a precision audio component. To prevent failure, avoid locations where the unit may be exposed
to strong shocks or vibrations.
• To clean, be sure to first switch off the unit's power, then wipe with a dry cloth. Never use benzene, thinner,
alcohol, or chemically-treated cleaning cloth because such volatile liquids could deform or discolor the unit.
6. Installation PRECAUTIONS
• Be sure to install and connect the unit before the connection to the AC mains outlet. Remove the unit's power
supply cord from the AC mains outlet when uninstalling or disconnecting the unit.
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the unit and the plug shall be easily accessible.
• Ensure that the unit is located at least 10 cm away from ceiling and wall surfaces, as shown in the figure
below, to allow adequate cooling and thus prevent extreme increases in temperature inside the unit. Also, do
not place any other devices within that range.
Over 10 cm
Over 10 cm
6
Over 10 cm
7. Nomenclature AND FUNCTIONS
7.1. MX-6224D Digital Mixer Amplifier 2x240W
[Front]
3
12
13
14
15 16 17
4 5
18 19
1. Power switch
Turns on and off the main power.
2. Sleep indicator
Lights green when the power switch is ON and
the unit is placed in sleep mode.
3. Microphone volume controls
Adjust each microphone input.
4. AUX 1 and 2 volume controls
Adjust the AUX 1 and 2 inputs.
5. Outside zone output switch
Turns on and off the outside zone output.
6. Outside zone output indicator
Lights red when sound is output from the Outside
zone output terminals (34).
7. Room zone output switch
Turns on and off the room zone output.
8. Room zone output indicator
Lights green when sound is output from the Room
zone output terminals (33).
9. Protection indicator
Lights red when the following situations are
detected.
• Built-in digital amplifier failure
• Overcurrent flow inside the unit
• Overheat inside the unit
• Speaker output failure
• Excessive input of low frequency signals
10. Peak level indicator
Lights red when the output sound level reaches
the peak level (0 dB) referenced to 0 dB at rated
output (100 V).
In general use, each volume should be set below
20
21
6 7
22 23 24
9 11
8 10 1
2
25
the point where the red indicator (0 dB) begins to
light.
11. Signal level indicator (–20 dB)
Lights green when the power amplifier's output
level is –20 dB referenced to 0 dB at rated output
(100 V).
12. Low frequency control (80 Hz)
Turn the control knob clockwise to enhance low
frequencies and counterclockwise to weaken
them. The frequency is flat at the center position.
Note
This Equalizer control will not affect the AUX 1
and 2 inputs.
13. Middle frequency control (2.5 kHz)
Turn the control knob clockwise to enhance middle
frequencies and counterclockwise to weaken
them. The frequency is flat at the center position.
Note
This Equalizer control will not affect the AUX 1
and 2 inputs.
14. High frequency control (12 kHz)
Turn the control knob clockwise to enhance the
high frequencies and counterclockwise to weaken
them. The frequency is flat at the center position.
Note
This Equalizer control will not affect the AUX 1
and 2 inputs.
15. Effect control
Adjusts effect response.
Turn the control knob clockwise to strengthen the
response of the effect selected by the Effect preset
type selection switch (16), and counterclockwise
to weaken it.
Turning the control fully counterclockwise
provides no effect response.
7
16. Effect preset type selection switch
Select the type of the sound effect from "DOME,"
"HALL," "PLATE," and "DELAY."
17. Effect Room size/Delay time selection switch
Select the reverberation/delay time of effect from
"S" (Short time), "M" (Medium time), and "L" (Long
time).
When set to OFF, the effect function is disabled.
18. Effect indicator
Lights green when the built-in effector is activated.
19. MIC 5 – 6 effect switch
Turns on and off the effect for the MIC 5 and 6
inputs.
Note
Effect for the MIC 1 to 4 inputs is constantly ON.
20. AUX 2 input jack
–20 dB*, 10 kΩ mixed monaural, unbalanced,
ø3.5 mm mini jack (3P: stereo)
Connects to an external music player.
21. Volume control for the outside zone
Adjusts the outside zone output level.
22. Equalizer switch (Horn speaker)
Set this switch to the ON position to optimize
the output sound for the TOA TC-631M/651M
speaker.
23. Outside zone output effect switch
Turns on and off the effect for the Outside zone
output.
Note
Effect for the Room zone output is constantly ON.
24. Volume control for the room zone
Adjusts the room zone output level.
25. Equalizer switch (Box speaker)
Set this switch to the ON position to optimize
the output sound for the TOA BS-1030B/1030W
speaker.
[Rear]
26
32
27
33
34
28
35 36
26. AC inlet
Connects to the AC power source using the
supplied AC power supply cord.
Note
Connect the AC power supply cord to a grounded
AC outlet.
27. Maintenance port
For service personnel use only.
28. Power amplifier input jacks
0 dB*, 10 kΩ, unbalanced, RCA pin jacks
Connect to an external speaker processor.
29. MIC 2 – 4 input jacks/XLR type connectors
–66 dB*, 200 Ω, electronically-balanced
Use either the phone jack or XLR type connector
for each MIC input.
8
29
37 38 39 40
30
31
41
Connect to the balanced type microphone, suitable
for on microphone application. A balanced type
dynamic microphone can be connected to each
phone jack input. For the microphones connected
to each XLR type input, see "40. MIC 2 – 6 (XLR)
phantom switch."
30. MIC 1 input jack
–50 dB* (24 V phantom powered)/–60 dB* phantom
power OFF), 600 Ω, electronically-balanced, ø6.3
mm phone jack
Connects to the balanced type microphone,
suitable for off microphone application (a lavaliere
microphone is recommended).
For the connectable microphones, see "31. MIC 1
phantom switch."
* 0 dB = 1 V
31. MIC 1 phantom switch
When switched ON, phantom power is supplied
to the MIC 1 input. Microphones connected to
the MIC 1 input depend on the switch setting as
follows.
ON:A balanced type phantom powered
condenser microphone can be connected.
OFF:A balanced type dynamic microphone can
be connected.
Important
Never use an unbalanced TS connector (sleeve
and ring connected) for connection to the MIC 1
input jack if you want to use the phantom power
supply.
Note
Before switching on the phantom power, be
sure to turn the MIC 1 volume control (3) fully
counterclockwise. Otherwise a switching noise
may be produced, possibly damaging the unit.
32. Functional ground terminal
Hum noise may be generated when external
equipment is connected to the unit. Connecting
this terminal to the functional ground terminal
of the external equipment may reduce the hum
noise.
Note
This terminal is not for protective ground.
33. Room zone output terminals [100 V Line]
Galvanic isolated balanced, M4 screw terminal
Connect to the 100 V line type speaker for the
room zone.
34. Outside zone output terminals [100 V Line]
Galvanic isolated balanced, M4 screw terminal
Connect to the 100 V line type speaker for the
outside zone.
35. Remote controller connection port
Connects to an optional RC-03 Remote Controller.
37. Effect bus output jacks
0 dB*, 600 Ω monaural, unbalanced, RCA pin
jacks (1 pair)
Connect to an external sound effector.
38. Recording output jacks
0 dB*, 600 Ω monaural, unbalanced, RCA pin
jacks (1 pair)
Connect to a sound recorder.
39. AUX 1 input jacks
–10 dB*, 10 kΩ mixed monaural, unbalanced,
RCA pin jacks (1 pair)
Connect to external auxiliary equipment.
40. MIC 2 – 6 (XLR) phantom switch
When switched ON, phantom power is supplied
to the XLR type connectors of MIC 2 – 6 inputs.
Microphones connected to the XLR type inputs
depend on the switch setting as follows.
ON:A balanced type phantom powered
condenser microphone can be connected.
OFF:A balanced type dynamic microphone can
be connected.
Note
Before switching on the phantom power, be sure
to turn the MIC 2 – 6 volume controls (3) fully
counterclockwise. Otherwise a switching noise
may be produced, possibly damaging the unit.
41. MIC 5 and 6 input jacks/XLR type connectors
–60 dB*, 600 Ω, electronically-balanced
Use either the phone jack or XLR type connector
for each MIC input.
Connect to the balanced type microphone,
suitable for on or off microphone application.
A balanced type dynamic microphone can be
connected to each phone jack input. For the
microphones connected to each XLR type input,
see "40. MIC 2 – 6 (XLR) phantom switch."
* 0 dB = 1 V
36. Preamplifier output jacks
0 dB*, 600 Ω monaural, unbalanced, RCA pin
jacks
Connect to an external power amplifier or an
external speaker processor.
9
7.2. RC-03 Remote Controller
[Top]
1
[Front]
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
1. Control line connection ports
Equipped with 2 RJ-45 ports.
Connect either of the 2 ports to the MX-6224D
amplifier.
Maximum cable length is 200 m.
Use STP or UTP Category 5 straight cable for LAN
with RJ-45 connectors.
Note
Do not use crossover cable.
2. Connection indicator
Lights green when the Remote Controller is
connected to the MX-6224D and the power switch
of MX-6224D is ON.
3. Outside zone indicator
Lights red when sound is output to the outside
zone.
10
4. Outside zone switch
Turns on and off the outside zone output.
5. Effect indicator
Lights green when effector is enabled.
6. Effect switch
Turns on and off the effector.
7. Room zone indicator
Lights green when sound is output to the room
zone.
8. Room zone switch
Turns on and off the room zone output.
8. Connection Example
F-1300B
Monitor speaker
DM-1300 (phantom swictch is OFF) or
EM-410 (phantom swictch is ON)
Microphone
A-2030
Mixer amplifier
DM-1300
Dynamic
Microphones
RC-03
RC-03
To AC mains
or
RC-03
Remote controller
MX-6224D
P-2240
Power amplifier
BS-1030B
Box speaker x 4
DM-1300
Dynamic
Microphones
P-2240
TC-631M
Horn speaker x 4
Recorder
Radio tuner or CD player
[Connection when signal processing equipment is used]
Effector
In
MX-6224D
Out
In
In
Out
Out
DP-SP3
Speaker processor
11
9. CONNECTIONS
Note
Always be sure that the power is switched OFF before connecting the unit. After connection is completed, be
sure to set all volume controls to their minimum level (fully rotated counterclockwise) before switching the power
ON again.
Monitor Speaker connections (see p. 16)
Microphone connections
(see p. 13)
or
Remote Controller
connections
(see p. 18)
Speaker connections
(see p. 17)
External Power Amp
connections (see p. 17)
External Auxiliary Equipment
connections (see p. 15)
External Effector connections
(see p. 15)
MX-6224D
External Speaker Processor connections (see p. 16)
12
9.1. Microphone Connections
• Switch OFF the unit's power before turning the phantom power switch
ON or OFF. Operating the switch without switching OFF the main
power could result in a large transient noise through the speakers,
potentially resulting in speaker failure.
• Avoid using phantom power when connecting an unbalanced
microphone to the MIC 1 input, as the microphone fails.
CAUTION
9.1.1. About the pin arrangement of the microphone input jack
Refer to the figure below when connecting the microphone input plug and connector:
[Phone plug]
• Balanced type
Sleeve: Ground
Ring: Cold
[XLR type connector (male)]
• Unbalanced type
Sleeve: Ground
Tip: Hot
Tip: Hot
Pin 1: Ground
Pin 2: Hot
Pin 3: Cold
9.1.2. MIC 1 connections
Microphones equipped with a phone plug can be connected to the MIC 1 input jack.
• Both balanced and unbalanced microphones can be used.
• Turning the phantom power switch ON causes a 24 V voltage to be applied to the phone plug's tip and ring.
• When using a lavalier microphone, it is recommended that TOA's EM-410 Lavalier Microphone be used.
Microphone sensitivity when phantom power is used or unused is as follows:
When used:
−50 dB*
When not used: −60 dB*
* 0 dB = 1 V
[When phantom power is used]
[When phantom power is not used]
EM-410
Electret condenser microphone
DM-1300
Dynamic microphone
OFF ON
OFF ON
Note
Use only balanced phone plugs when connecting a condenser
microphone that requires phantom power to MIC 1.
+24 V
phantom power
MIC 1
phantom switch
–
+ +
13
9.1.3. MIC 2 – 6 connections
Microphones equipped with either an XLR connector or a phone plug can be used with microphone inputs 2 – 6.
• Balanced or unbalanced microphones can be connected to the phone jack.
• Switching ON the phantom power switch supplies power to all MIC 2 – 6 XLR connectors.
• No phantom power is supplied to the MIC 2 – 6 phone jacks.
+24 V
phantom power
Tip
When phantom power is used for the MIC 2 – 6 XLR connectors,
a 24 V voltage is applied to Pins 2 and 3 in each connector.
1
–
3
MIC 2 − 6
phantom switch
+
2
+
Microphone sensitivity is as follows:
MIC 2 – 4: −66 dB (high sensitivity)
MIC 5 – 6: −60 dB
MIC 2 − 4
For microphones connected to MIC 2 – 4, it is assumed
that the microphone will be mounted on a microphone
stand and used at a distance from the speaker's mouth.
For microphones connected to MIC 5 or 6, it is assumed
that the microphone will be used close to the speaker's
mouth.
MIC 5, 6
Note
Do not simultaneously connect microphones to the XLR connector and the phone jack of the same number.
Input signals to the microphone input may be attenuated, potentially disabling normal use of these connectors.
[When phantom power is used]
[When phantom power is not used]
Dynamic microphones
Electret condenser microphones
DM-1300
OFF ON
OFF ON
DM-1300
Dynamic microphone
14
DM-1300
Note
In this figure, since a microphone with a phone plug is
used for MIC 6 input, the phantom power is not supplied.
Dynamic microphone
9.2. External Auxiliary Equipment Connections
9.2.1. AUX 1 input jack connections
Two input signals can be mixed within the unit. For
stereo sound source wiring, connect to both RCA pin
jacks. For monaural sound source wiring, connect to
either jack.
To external auxiliary equipment
9.2.2. AUX 2 input jack connections
Signal inputs to the stereo mini jacks are mixed
within the unit. For stereo sound source wiring, use
a stereo mini plug for connection. For connection to
a monaural sound source, use either a monaural or
stereo mini plug.
Music player, etc
9.3. External Effector Connections
An external effector can be connected without using
the unit's internal effector function (see p. 19). If
the Effect Room Size/Delay Time Selection Switch
is switched OFF, the internal effector is disabled, but
external effectors can still be used. Even when using
an external effector, the effect on MIC 5 and 6 can be
cut off with the MIC 5 and 6 effect switches.
Effector
In
Out
Tips
• For information on effector use, see the instruction
manual enclosed with the effector.
• The internal effector can also be used while the
external effector is connected. Using both effectors
at the same time will result in both effects being
mixed.
15
9.4. Monitor Speaker Connections
Amplifiers and speakers for monitoring applications can be connected using the effect bus output jack.
A-2030
Mixer amplifier
F-1300B
Monitor speaker
Monitor speaker sound volume is not interlocked with the outside and room volume controls located on the
front panel, but is instead interlocked with the effect volume control. When using both the monitor speaker and
internal effector, adjust the effect volume control first, then adjust the sound volume with the volume control of
the amplifier for monitoring.
Tips
• Output from the effect bus output jack is not interlocked with the front panel-mounted outside and room
volume controls.
• For more information on using the amplifier for monitoring, see the instruction manual enclosed with the
amplifier.
9.5. External Speaker Processor Connections
TOA's DP-SP3 Digital Speaker Processor can be used as an external speaker processor without using the
unit's internal speaker equalizer function (see p. 21). The external speaker processor can also be used for
either the ROOM or OUTSIDE speakers.
For more information on use of the DP-SP3 processor, see the instruction manual enclosed with the DP-SP3.
For ROOM zone
Out
For OUTSIDE zone
In
In
Out
DP-SP3 Digital speaker processor
Note
Turn the Equalizer switch OFF for zones using the
DP-SP3 Digital Speaker Processor. If not turned
OFF, the effects produced by both the external
and internal effectors will be applied and optimum
sound quality adjustment cannot be achieved.
SP EQ
OFF
16
ON
9.6. Speaker Connections
WARNING
Be sure to reattach the terminal cover after connections are completed.
Failure to do so could result in electrical shocks, as a high voltage is
applied to the speaker terminals. Also, take care to NEVER touch the
speaker terminals.
Notes
• Connect only high-impedance 100 V line speakers to the unit. Connection of low-impedance speakers could
cause amplifier failure.
• Carry out connections so that the total impedance at each speaker terminal is greater than the value shown
in the figure below (42 Ω). If the impedance is smaller than the indicated value, the amplifier could fail.
Tips
• The unit is designed for a total impedance to be greater than the indicated value (42 Ω) when high-impedance
100 V line speakers are connected to each speaker terminal and the total wattage is less than 240 W.
• The unit can produce optimum sound quality conditions when the following TOA speakers are connected and
the speaker equalizer function is used. (see p. 21.)
For ROOM zone:
BS-1030B, BS-1030W
For OUTSIDE zone: TC-631M, TC-651M
MX-6224D
OUTSIDE zone
Horn speaker
ROOM zone
Box speaker
Total impedance:
42 Ω or more
Total impedance:
42 Ω or more
9.7. Extension Power Amplifier Connections
The unit is designed for connection to high-impedance 100 V line speakers, adding up to a total wattage of
240 W each for OUTSIDE and ROOM use. However, if more speakers are required, the power amplifier can
be extended.
The sound volume of speakers connected
to the extension power amplifier is not
interlocked with the front panel-mounted
outside and room volume controls.
Adjust the volume using the extension
power amplifier's volume control.
Tips
• Output from the preamplifier output jacks is
not interlocked with the front panel-mounted
outside and room volume controls.
• Output from the preamplifier output jacks is
interlocked with the outside and room zone
output switches.
• Since the speaker equalizer affects output
from the preamplifier output jacks, connect the
designated speakers (see p. 21.) to the power
amplifier when the speaker equalizer switch is
ON for the zone(s).
• For more information on connecting speakers to
the extension amplifier and use of the extension
amplifier, see the instruction manual enclosed
with the amplifier.
OUTSIDE zone
P-2240
Power amplifier
Speaker
ROOM zone
P-2240
Speaker
17
9.8. RC-03 Remote Controller Connections
CAUTION
Do not connect any other equipment than the RC-03 Remote Controller
to the MX-6224D’s Remote controller connection port.
If other equipment, such as a PC, hub or network device, is connected
to that port, the connected equipment could be damaged.
Up to three RC-03 controllers can be connected to the unit.
The RC-03 has two connection ports, which permit connection in daisy chain fashion. Both ports can be used.
RC-03
Remote controller
RC-03
RC-03
Use STP or UTP Category 5 straight cable for LAN with RJ-45 connectors for connection.
Note
Do not use crossover cable.
The total permissible cable extension distance is as follows:
*1 ‌When using a cable with the following specifications:
No. of Connected
Total Extension Distance*1
• STP Category 5 straight cable
RC-03 Units
• AWG 24
1
200 m or less
• Cable resistance (one way): 93.8 Ω/km
*2 ‌This table refers to the total length of cable between
2
Total of 115 m or less*2
the unit and the RC-03, and between RC-03 units.
3
Total of 80 m or less*2
‌There are no restrictions on the distance between
devices.
(When one RC-03 unit is connected:)
(a)
(a) ≤ 200 m
MX-6224D
RC-03
Under 24 Ω (one way)
(When two RC-03 units are connected:)
(a)
MX-6224D
(b)
RC-03
Under 12 Ω (one way)
(a) + (b) ≤ 115 m
RC-03
(When three RC-03 units are connected:)
(a)
MX-6224D
18
(b)
RC-03
(c)
RC-03
Under 8 Ω (one way)
(a) + (b) + (c) ≤ 80 m
RC-03
10. SETTINGS
After connection completion, perform settings while sound is actually being broadcasting (see p. 22).
MX-6224D
Microphone Equalizer
settings (see below)
Effector settings
(see below)
Speaker Equalizer settings
(see p. 21)
10.1. Microphone Equalizer Settings
The equalizer settings of MIC 1 – 6 can be adjusted to low, middle and high frequency bands. Rotating the
Frequency Control knob of each band clockwise enhances the relevant band, while counterclockwise rotation
weakens the band.
Note
The equalizer settings of AUX 1 and 2 inputs cannot be adjusted.
Tip
Each frequency band's center frequency is as follows:
Low frequency band:
±15 dB, 80 Hz
Middle frequency band: ±15 dB, 2.5 kHz
High frequency band: ±15 dB, 12 kHz
Weakens
Enhances
10.2. Effector Settings
The unit’s built-in effector function offers a range of settings.
The effector is enabled whenever the Effect Room Size/Delay Time Selection switch is set to any other position
than OFF. When enabled, the effector is applied to each input and output as follows:
Input
Always enabled
Output
Mic 1 − 4
Enabled or disabled Mic 5, 6
(selectable)
Cannot be enabled
OUTSIDE zone
Enabled or disabled
(selectable)
ROOM zone
Always enabled
MX-6224D
AUX 1, 2
Note
The effector is not applicable to source signals input from AUX 1 and 2.
19
10.2.1. Effector types and settings
MX-6224D
3
1 2
Step 1. Select the type of effect to be used with the Effect Preset Type Selection switch.
Refer to the following table for the types of effects that can be selected:
Effect Name
DOME
HALL
PLATE
DELAY
Effect Description
Creates an effect of stone walls with semi-domed ceilings.
Creates an effect of wooden walls with carpeted floors.
Creates an effect of metallic reverberation as by a metal plate hung from
the ceiling, accompanied by an extended high frequency band.
Creates an effect of sound being repeatedly reflected following a delay.
Step 2. Enable or disable (ON/OFF) the effector, and select the reverberation time and delay time conditions
using the Effect Room Size/Delay Time Selection Switch.
L
M
S
OFF
DOME, HALL or PLATE settings
Long reverberation time
Medium reverberation time
Short reverberation time
Effector disabled.
DELAY settings
Long delay time
Medium delay time
Short delay time
Effector disabled.
Step 3. Adjust the effector's response strength.
To adjust, rotate the Effect Control Knob. The effect becomes more pronounced as the knob is rotated
clockwise, and weakens as the knob is rotated counterclockwise.
10.2.2. Effector settings for MIC 5 and 6 inputs
The effector can be enabled or disabled (ON/OFF) for Microphone 5 and 6 inputs (default setting: OFF).
Step:To apply the sound effect to these inputs, set their Effect switches
to the ON position.
The following table shows the effector status of each input when
MIC 5 and 6 Effect switches are set to the ON or OFF position:
MIC 1–4
MIC 5 and 6
AUX 1 and 2
OFF
Effector enabled
Effector disabled
Effector disabled
ON
Effector enabled
Effector enabled
Effector disabled
MIC 5 − 6 effect switch
20
10.2.3. Settings when using the effector for OUTSIDE zones
The effector can also be enabled or disabled (ON/OFF) for OUTSIDE zone output (default setting: OFF).
Step:‌To apply the sound effect to broadcasts made to OUTSIDE zones,
set the Outside Zone Output Effect switch to the ON position.
The following table shows the effector status of each zone output
when the Outside Zone Output Effect Switch is set to the ON or
OFF position:
ROOM zone output
OUTSIDE zone output
OFF
Effector enabled
Effector disabled
ON
Effector enabled
Effector enabled
Outside zone output effect switch
10.3. Speaker Equalizer Settings
The unit’s built-in speaker equalizer can be used to adjust the following TOA speakers for optimal sound quality:
For ROOM zone: BS-1030B, BS-1030W
For OUTSIDE zone: TC-631M. TC-651M
To use this function, set the Equalizer switch ON for the desired zone(s).
For OUTSIDE zone
For ROOM zone
SP EQ
OFF
ON
21
11. OPERATIONS
11.1. Making Broadcasts
11.1.1. When using the MX-6224D amplifier alone for broadcasting
MX-6224D
4, 6
3, 7
2
1, 5
3, 7
Safety Measures to Prevent Abrupt Loud Sound Output
Step 1. Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position.
Step 2. When using a sound player or other external sound source, connect it to AUX 2 input jack located on
the front panel.
Step 3. Ensure that all volume controls have been fully rotated counterclockwise.
Step 4. Ensure that both the OUTSIDE and ROOM Zone output switches are placed in the OFF position.
Switch ON the Power after Completing Safety Measures.
Step 5. Press the Power switch.
AC main power is turned on and the Sleep indicator lights.
Select Broadcast Zones.
Step 6. Press the Zone output switch(es) for the desired broadcast zone(s).
The Sleep indicator extinguishes and the Zone output indicator(s) for the selected zone(s) will light.
Adjust the Sound Volume.
Step 7. Rotate the unit's volume control for the zone and the volume control of a microphone or external sound
source to be used clockwise to adjust the broadcast volume to an appropriate level.
Adjust the volume so that the Peak Level indicator does not continuously light.
Peak level indicators
Note
Start playing the external sound source before volume adjustment. If play is started after the volume is
set, a loud sound may be suddenly output.
22
Tip
For more information about operation of the external sound source, see the instruction manual enclosed
with that sound source.
11.1.2. ‌When using the MX-6224D amplifier in conjunction with the RC-03 Remote Controller (1 – 3 units)
for broadcasting
4, 6
3, 7
MX-6224D
2
RC-03
1, 5
3, 7
4, 6
8
Safety Measures to Prevent Abrupt Loud Sound Output
Step 1. Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position.
Step 2. When using a sound player or other external sound source, connect it to AUX 2 input jack located on
the front panel.
Step 3. Ensure that all volume controls have been fully rotated counterclockwise.
Step 4. Ensure that both the OUTSIDE and ROOM Zone output switches on both the amplifier and Remote
Controller are set to OFF.
Switch ON the Power after Completing Safety Measures.
Step 5. Press the Power switch.
AC main power is turned on and the Sleep indicator lights.
Select Broadcast Zones.
Step 6. Press the Zone output switch(es) on either the amplifier or the Remote Controller for the desired broadcast
zone(s).
The Sleep indicator extinguishes and the Zone output indicator for the selected zone(s) will light.
Tip
The relevant zone output indicator for the amplifier or Remote Controller, other than that actually being
operated, also lights.
23
Adjust the Sound Volume.
Step 7. Rotate the unit’s volume control for the zone and the volume control of a microphone or external sound
source to be used counterclockwise to adjust the broadcast volume to an appropriate level.
Adjust the volume so that the Peak Level indicator does not continuously light.
Peak level indicators
Note
Start playing the external sound source before volume adjustment. If play is started after the volume is
set, a loud sound may be suddenly output.
Tip
For more information about operation of the external sound source, see the instruction manual enclosed
with that sound source.
Effector Function Settings
Step 8. When using the effector, press the Effect switch on any connected Remote Controller.
The Effect indicators on all Remote Controllers light, and the effector is enabled.
Notes
• Even if the effector has been switched on at the amplifier, it cannot be used until the Effect switch on
any of the connected Remote Controllers is pressed.
• If the effector has not been switched on at the amplifier, it cannot be used even if the Effect switch on
a Remote Controller is pressed.
11.2. Using Sleep Mode
The sleep mode is a power-saving function that puts the amplifier on standby to minimize power consumption.
It can also resume broadcasts more quickly than switching off the power.
After use, the amplifier can be placed in Sleep (standby) mode with no need of switching off its AC main power.
Sleep mode can be enabled when both the outside and room outputs are OFF.
11.2.1. Setting the MX-6224D amplifier to Sleep mode
MX-6224D
1
2
1
24
Sleep indicator
Step 1. Fully rotate all volume controls counterclockwise.
Step 2. Set the OUTSIDE and ROOM Zone output switches to OFF.
The Sleep indicator lights, placing the unit in Sleep mode. To resume broadcasting, press the Zone
output switch for the desired broadcast zone(s), then adjust the sound volume with the volume control.
11.2.2. Setting the MX-6224D amplifier and the RC-03 Remote Controller (1 – 3 units) to Sleep mode
2
1
MX-6224D
Sleep indicator
1
RC-03
2
Step 1. Fully rotate all volume controls counterclockwise.
Step 2. Set all Zone switches for the OUTSIDE and ROOM outputs of the amplifier and Remote Controllers to OFF.
The Sleep indicator lights, placing both the amplifier and connected controllers in Sleep mode. To
resume broadcasting, press the Zone switch for the desired broadcast zone(s) on either the amplifier
or Remote Controller, and adjust the sound volume with the volume control.
11.3. Switching the AC Power OFF
When done using the amplifier, follow the procedure below to switch OFF the AC main power:
MX-6224D
2
Step 1. Place the unit in Sleep mode (see "Using Sleep Mode" on p. 24).
Step 2. Press the MX-6224D amplifier’s Power switch.
The Sleep indicator extinguishes and the AC main power is switched OFF.
25
12. RACK MOUNTING
To mount the unit in an equipment rack, use the optional MB-25B Rack mounting bracket.
Step 1. Remove the 4 plastic feet attached to the bottom surface of the unit.
Plastic foot
Step 2. Attach the MB-25B to the unit using the supplied 4 screws.
2
M4 x 16 Machine screw (supplied with the MB-25B)
Note: ‌Be sure to use the supplied
screws.
3
MB-25B
Step 3. Mount the unit on the equipment rack.
CAUTION
Rack-mounting screws are not supplied with the unit.
Prepare them that are appropriate for the equipment rack.
Note
To improve ventilation, ensure that a perforated
panel (panel with air openings) of 1-unit size or
greater is mounted over and under the unit, as
well as on the top and at the bottom of the rack.
26
Perforated panel
(panel with ventilation openings)
MX-6224D unit
13. TROUBLE SHOOTING
Symptom
No sound output.
Possible Cause
When protection indicator is unlit
AC power supply cord is not connected.
Microphone and other sound source
are not connected.
Speakers are not connected.
Power switch is set to OFF.
Both Outside Zone and Room Zone
output switches are set to OFF.
All volume controls are set to minimum
position.
[When MIC 1 is in use]
Microphone requiring phantom power is
in use, but phantom power switch is set
to OFF.
[When MIC 2 – 6 inputs are in use]
Microphone requiring phantom power is
in use, but phantom power switch is set
to OFF.
[When MIC 2 – 6 inputs are in use]
Microphone requiring phantom power is
connected to phone jack.
When protection indicator is lit
Vent is blocked, causing heat buildup.
Excessively loud speaker sound output
causes heat buildup.
Intermittent
sound output.
Cannot use
effector.
Cannot turn unit
ON/OFF using
remote controller.
Cannot turn unit
OFF using the
remote controller.
MIC 1 − 6 EQ
does not work.
Speaker wires shorted.
Low-impedance speaker connected to
speaker terminals.
Effect Room Size/Delay time selection
switch is set to OFF.
Effect control is set to minimum position.
Audio is input to AUX 1 and 2, or PWR
AMP IN.
In-use remote controller effect switch is set
to OFF.
Outside Zone output effect switch is set to
OFF.
[When remote controller's connection
indicator is unlit]
Cable is not correctly connected.
[When remote controller's connection
indicator is lit]
The unit's Outside Zone and Room Zone
output switches are both set to ON.
The unit's Outside Zone and Room Zone
output switches are both set to ON.
Audio is input to AUX 1 and 2, or PWR
AMP IN.
Remedy
Check connections.
Set power switch to ON.
Set either of the output switches to ON.
Set volume controls to appropriate level.
Set phantom switch to ON.
Note
Do not use unbalanced type microphones.
Set phantom switch to ON.
Connect microphone to XLR jack. Note that
phantom power is not supplied to phone
jack.
Remove objects blocking the vent. Sound
will begin to be output when temperature
falls.
Adjust amplifier volume controls. Sound
will begin to be output when temperature
falls.
Find and fix speaker wire short circuit.
Connect speaker with higher impedance
than specified rating.
Select mode other than OFF.
Set effect control to appropriate level.
Correct operation.
(Effector function is disabled for AUX 1 and
2, and PWR AMP IN.)
Set the remote controller effect switch to
ON.
To apply sound effect to outside zone, set
Outside Zone output effect switch to ON.
Check cable connections.
Correct operation.
(When the unit is ON, it cannot be turned
OFF using the remote controller.)
Set both Outside Zone and Room Zone
output switches to OFF.
(When the unit is ON, it cannot be turned
OFF using the remote controller.)
Correct operation.
(Equalization is disabled for AUX 1 and 2,
and PWR AMP IN.)
27
28
Mic 1 Vol
Mix
Mix
AUX 2 in
AUX 2 Vol
AUX 1 Vol
Mic 5-6 Vol
Mic 5-6
Effect SW
Mic 2-6
Phantom SW
to
Mic 2-4 Vol
XLR only
to
XLR only
AUX 1 in
Mic 5-6 in
Mic 2-4 in
Mic 1 in
Mic 1
Phantom SW
Phantom Power
Supply +24V
Mix for
Effect
Mix
Effect
Vol
Lo Mid
Mic EQ
Hi
Mix
Effect
Select
Effect
Size
Select
Effect Bus
out
Rec out
Effect Preset Effect Size
Select SW
Select SW
-L
-DOME
-M
-HALL
-S
-PLATE
-OFF
-DELAY
ADC
ADC
DSP
SP EQ
SP EQ
Outside SP EQ SW SP EQ SW
(Outside)
Effect SW (Room)
Mix
Mix
Reverb signal is mixed with original signal.
HPF
Comp
Comp
DAC
DAC
Output
SW
(Outside)
Output
SW
(Room)
PRE AMP PWR AMP
out
in
Outside Vol
Room Vol
PWR AMP
(Outside)
PWR AMP
(Room)
Note
If some devices are connected to "PWR AMP in,"
"PWR AMP in" signal is disconnected from "PRE AMP out."
Effect
Sleep
Signal (-20 dB)
Peak (0 dB)
Protect
Output
Outside
Signal (-20 dB)
Peak (0 dB)
Protect
Output
Room
Indicators
Output
(Outside)
Output
(Room)
14. BLOCK DIAGRAM
15. SPECIFICATIONS
[MX-6224D]
Power Source
Power Output
Power Consumption
Amplification System
Frequency Response
Distortion
Input
Output
Phantom Power
Signal to Noise Ratio
Controls
Indicators
Ventilation
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Dimensions
Installation Method
Weight
Finish
220 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
240 W x 2 channels (100 V, 42 Ω, rated output)
100 W (according to IEC60065), 570 W (at rated output, both channels)
Class D, Output transformerless galvanic isolated output
50 Hz – 20 kHz, ±3 dB (at 1/3 rated output, rated load, from power amplifier input)
1 % or less (at 1 kHz, 1/3 rated output power)
MIC 1:–50 dB* (24 V phantom powered)/–60 dB* (phantom power OFF)
600 Ω, electronically-balanced, ø6.3 mm phone jack (3P: balance)
MIC 2 – 4:– 66 dB*, 200 Ω, electronically-balanced,
XLR-3-31 type and ø6.3 mm phone jack (3P: balance)
(either one usable)
MIC 5 – 6:– 60 dB*, 600 Ω, electronically-balanced,
XLR-3-31 type and ø6.3 mm phone jack (3P: balance)
(either one usable)
AUX 1:–10 dB*, 10 kΩ mixed monaural, unbalanced, RCA pin jacks (1 pair)
AUX 2:–20 dB*, 10 kΩ mixed monaural, unbalanced,
ø3.5 mm mini jack (3P: stereo)
Power amplifier input:
0 dB*, 10 kΩ, unbalanced,
RCA pin jacks (1 each for ROOM and OUTSIDE outputs)
Speaker output:2 zones, 100 V (42 Ω), galvanic isolated balanced, M4 screw
terminal
Recording output: 0 dB*, 600 Ω monaural, unbalanced, RCA pin jacks (1 pair)
Effect bus output: 0 dB*, 600 Ω monaural, unbalanced, RCA pin jacks (1 pair)
Preamplifier output: 0 dB*, 600 Ω monaural, unbalanced,
RCA pin jacks (1 each for ROOM and OUTSIDE outputs)
ON/OFF switchable for MIC 1 and XLR-3-31 type connectors of MIC 2 – 6
60 dB or more (All volume controls: min.)
6 Microphone volume controls, 2 AUX volume controls,
1 ROOM output switch, 1 ROOM volume control, 1 OUTSIDE output switch,
1 OUTSIDE volume control, 1 Effect control (0 to 100 %) of Effect bus,
1 Effect preset type selection switch (DOME/HALL/PLATE/DELAY),
1 Effect Room size/Delay time selection switch (L/M/S/OFF),
1 Effect output selection switch (OFF/ON),
1 MIC 5 – 6 effect switch,
1 Low EQ control (±15 dB, 80 Hz) for MIC 1 – 6,
1 Mid EQ control (±15 dB, 2.5 kHz) for MIC 1 – 6,
1 High EQ control (±15 dB, 12 kHz) for MIC 1 – 6,
1 Speaker EQ (TC-631M, TC-651M) switch for OUTSIDE output,
1 Speaker EQ (BS-1030B, BS-1030W) switch for ROOM output, 1 Power switch,
1 Phantom switch for MIC 1, 1 Phantom switch for MIC 2 – 6 (XLR-3-31)
SLEEP indicator
Output Level meters (2 points, –20 dB and 0 dB) for ROOM and OUTSIDE
Protection indicators for ROOM and OUTSIDE amplifiers
Output indicators for ROOM and OUTSIDE
EFFECT indicator for MIC 1 – 6
Natural air cooling
0 to 40 ºC (32 to 104 ºF)
35 to 80% RH (no condensation)
420 (w) x 99.8 (h) x 360.6 (d) mm (16.54" x 3.93" x 14.2")
Desktop mount, Rack mount with mounting bracket MB-25B (option)
6.1 kg (13.45 lb)
Front Panel: Aluminum, black, alumite
Steel plate, black, paint
Case:
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Power supply cord . .................................... 1
Sticker for Arabic indication ....................... 1
29
[RC-03]
Power Source
Consumption current
Terminal
Controls
Indicators
Connection Cable
Maximum cable length
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Dimensions
Weight
Finish
5 V DC (supplied from MX-6224D)
120 mA Maximum
RJ-45 connector
1 ROOM ON/OFF control switch
1 OUTSIDE ON/OFF control switch
1 Effect ON/OFF control switch
CONNECTION indicator
Output ON/OFF for ROOM and OUTSIDE
EFFECT ON/OFF
Shielded Category 5 twisted pair Straight cable for LAN (CAT5-STP)
Unshielded Category 5 twisted pair Straight cable for LAN (CAT5-UTP)
200 m
0 to 40 ºC (32 to 104 ºF)
35 to 80% RH (no condensation)
86 (w) x 55.3 (h) x 87.2 (d) mm (3.39" x 2.18" x 3.43")
380 g (0.84 lb)
Plated steel sheet, white (RAL 9016 equivalent), paint
• Accessory
Sticker for Arabic Indication ....................... 1
• Optional products
Power amplifier:
Multichannel power amplifier:
Dynamic microphone:
Lavalier microphone:
Horn speaker:
Universal speaker:
Rack mounting bracket:
Perforated panel:
P-2240
DA-250FH
DM-1300
EM-410
TC-631M, TC-651M
BS-1030B, BS-1030W
MB-25B
PF-013B
16. DIMENSIONAL DIAGRAM
51 (2.01")
55.3 (2.18")
16.2. RC-03
88.4 (3.48")
324 (12.76")
22.8 (0.9")
86 (3.39")
420 (16.54")
87.2 (3.43")
99.8 (3.93")
16.1. MX-6224D
360.6 (14.2")
86 (3.39")
Unit : mm
Traceability Information for Europe
Manufacturer:
TOA Corporation
7-2-1, Minatojima-Nakamachi, Chuo-ku, Kobe, Hyogo,
Japan
Authorized representative:
TOA Electronics Europe GmbH
Suederstrasse 282, 20537 Hamburg,
Germany
URL: http://www.toa.jp/
‫]‪[RC-03‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ )ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪(MX-6224D‬‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪RJ-45‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺰﻭﺝ ﻣﻠﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ CAT 5‬ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪(CAT5-STP) LAN‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺰﻭﺝ ﻣﻠﺘﻮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ CAT 5‬ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪(CAT5-UTP) LAN‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪°٤٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪°١٠٤‬ﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٪٨٠‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ(‬
‫‪) ٨٦‬ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪) ٥٥,٣‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪) ٨٧,٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ )‪ ٣,٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ × ‪ ٢,١٨‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ × ‪ ٣,٤٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٣٨٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ )‪ ٠,٨٤‬ﺭﻃﻞ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻮﻻﺫﻳﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ )ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ،(RAL 9016‬ﻃﻼء‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻄﻴﺐ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١ ..................................‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪P-2240‬‬
‫‪DA-250FH‬‬
‫‪DM-1300‬‬
‫‪EM-410‬‬
‫‪TC-651M ،TC-631M‬‬
‫‪BS-1030W ،BS-1030B‬‬
‫‪MB-25B‬‬
‫‪PF-013B‬‬
‫‪ .١٦‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻸﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪RC-03 .٢.١٦‬‬
‫‪MX-6224D .١.١٦‬‬
‫˽́́ ́˽˼‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫́̂̂ ˼̂˼‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫˺˾ ˺˹˻‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫˼˾˾ ́˺˻‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫˹˻˽ ˽˾˿˺‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫˿́ ̂˼˼‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫˻̀́ ˼˽˼‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫́˻˻‬
‫)̂˹‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫˽˻˼ ˿̀˻˺‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫˿˹˿˼ ˻˽˺‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫˿́ ̂˼˼‪ΔλϭΑ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪http://www.toa.jp/ :‬‬
‫‪ .١٥‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪[MX-6224D‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻄﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٢٢٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ‪ ٢٤٠ -‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ × ‪ ٢‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ‪ ٤٢ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٧٠ ،(IEC60065‬ﻭﺍﻁ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،D‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻏﻠﻔﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٢٠ -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٣± ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٣/١ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ* )ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ(‪ ٦٠-/‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ* )ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪(OFF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪:١‬‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٦,٣‬ﻣﻢ )‪ :3P‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٦٦- :٤ - ٢‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٢٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ XLR-3-31‬ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٦,٣‬ﻣﻢ )‪ :3P‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ( )ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٦٠- :٦ - ٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٦٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ XLR-3-31‬ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٦,٣‬ﻣﻢ )‪ :3P‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ( )ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ١٠ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ‪) RCA‬ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪:١‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ١٠ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪،‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪:٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣,٥‬ﻣﻢ )‪ :3P‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ١٠ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ١) RCA‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‪ ١٠٠ ،‬ﻗﻮﻟﻂ )‪ ٤٢‬ﺃﻭﻡ(‪،‬ﻏﻠﻔﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪M4‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٦٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ‪) RCA‬ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٦٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ‪) RCA‬ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ٠ :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٦٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ١) RCA‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ XLR-3-31‬ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪٦ - ٢‬‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ١ ،‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ١ ،‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ١ ،‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ )‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٪ ١٠٠‬ﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )ﻗﺒﺔ‪/‬ﻗﺎﻋﺔ‪/‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ )ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪،(OFF‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‪،((ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪،٦ - ٥‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪ ١٥±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٨٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪،٦ - ١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ )‪ ١٥±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٢,٥ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪،٦ - ١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ ١٥±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ١٢ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪،٦ - ١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (TC-651M ،TC-631M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (BS-1030W ،BS-1030B‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ١ ،‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ١ ،١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR-3-31) ٦ - ٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ )‪ ٢‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ ٢٠- ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻭ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻀﺨﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪٦ - ١‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪° ٤٠‬ﻡ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪° ١٠٤‬ﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٪٨٠‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ(‬
‫‪) ٤٢٠‬ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪) ٩٩,٨‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪) ٣٦٠,٦‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ )‪ ١٦,٥٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ × ‪ ٣,٩٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ × ‪ ١٤,٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺘﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪) MB-25B‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪ ٦,١‬ﻛﺠﻢ )‪ ١٣,٤٥‬ﺭﻃﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﻟﻤﻨﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻮﻣﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﺡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻃﻼء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫* ‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ = ‪ ١‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪١ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١ .......................................‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
Mic 1
Phantom SW
Mic 1 in
AUX 2 in
AUX 1 in
Mic 5-6 in
Mic 2-4 in
‫ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ‬.١٤
Mic 5-6
Effect SW
Mic 2-6
Phantom SW
Mic 1 Vol
Phantom Power
Supply +24V
to
XLR only
AUX 1 Vol
Mic 5-6 Vol
to
Mic 2-4 Vol
XLR only
Mix
Mix
AUX 2 Vol
Mix
Mix for
Effect
Mic EQ
Lo Mid
Effect
Vol
Hi
Mix
ADC
ADC
DSP
Effect
Effect
Select
SP EQ
SP EQ
Outside SP EQ SW SP EQ SW
(Outside)
Effect SW (Room)
Mix
Mix
ΔϴϠλϷ΍ΓέΎηϹ΍ϊϣΔϳΩΩήΘϟ΍ΓέΎηϹ΍ΝΰϣϢΘϳ
Size
Select
Effect Preset Effect Size
Select SW
Select SW
-L
-DOME
-M
-HALL
-S
-PLATE
-OFF
-DELAY
Rec out
Effect Bus
out
HPF
Comp
Comp
DAC
DAC
Room Vol
PWR AMP
(Outside)
PWR AMP
(Room)
ΔψΣϼϣ
"PWR AMP inˬPWR AMP inϰϟ·ΓΰϬΟϷ΍ξόΑϞϴλϮΗϢΗ΍Ϋ·
."PRE AMP outϦϣΓέΎηϹ΍ϞμϓϢΘϳ
Output
SW
(Room)
Output
SW
(Outside)
PRE AMP PWR AMP
out
in
Outside Vol
Indicators
Output
(Room)
Output
(Outside)
Output
Room
Protect
Peak (0 dB)
Signal (-20 dB)
Output
Outside
Protect
Peak (0 dB)
Sleep
Signal (-20 dB)
Effect
٢٨
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎء‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪[١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫]ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪[٦ - ٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫]ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪[٦ - ٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻀﺎء‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪ OFF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ٦ - ١‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ،٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪PWR AMP‬‬
‫‪.IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫]ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ[‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ،٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪PWR AMP‬‬
‫‪.IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.ON‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ .XLR‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ ‪PWR‬‬
‫‪(.AMP IN‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،ON‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ OFF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،ON‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ OFF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ ‪PWR‬‬
‫‪(.AMP IN‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ‪ MB-25B‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ΔϴϜϴΘγϼΑϡΪϗ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ MB-25B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(MB-25BϊϣίϬΟϣ M4 x 16ΏϟϭϠϣϲϏέΑ‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫˼‬
‫‪MB-25B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﻮﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﻣﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍء( ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪-١‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ΔϣήΨϤϟ΍ΔΣϮϠϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ΔϳϮϬΘϠϟΕΎΤΘϓϊϣΔΣϮϟ‬‬
‫‪MX-6224DΓΪΣϮϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ .٢.٢.١١‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ MX-6224D‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣ - ١) RC-03‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ϥϭϛγϟ΍έη΅ϣ‬‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣.١١‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪OFF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪:OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ“ ﻓﻲ ﺹ‪.(٢٤ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪.MX-6224D‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﻔﺖ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Γϭέάϟ΍ϯϮΘδϣΕ΍ήηΆϣ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٨‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻲء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢.١١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ OFF‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١.٢.١١‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ MX-6224D‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ϥϭϛγϟ΍έη΅ϣ‬‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫)ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢.١.١١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ MX-6224D‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣ - ١) RC-03‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫˺ˬ˾‬
‫˽ˬ˿‬
‫˼ˬ ̀‬
‫˼ˬ̀‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﻔﺖ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١.١١‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫‪ .١.١.١١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ MX-6224D‬ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫˺ˬ˾‬
‫˽ˬ˿‬
‫˼ˬ ̀‬
‫˼ˬ̀‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﻔﺖ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ )ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Γϭέάϟ΍ϯϮΘδϣΕ΍ήηΆϣ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣.٢.١٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪.(OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪:OFF‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪OFF‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ON‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫‪ϲΟέΎΧϕΎτϨϟ΍ΝήΧήΛΆϣΡΎΘϔϣ‬‬
‫‪ .٣.١٠‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ TOA‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺜﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪BS-1030W ،BS-1030B :‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪TC-651M .TC-631M :‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ϲΟέΎΧϕΎτϨϠϟ‬‬
‫‪ϲϠΧ΍ΩϕΎτϨϠϟ‬‬
‫‪ΔϋΎϤδϟ΍ϝΩΎόϣ‬‬
‫‪ONϞϴϐθΗ‬‬
‫·‪OFFϕϼϏ‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪ .١.٢.١٠‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺮ ﺑﺴﻘﻒ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺒّﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺐ ﺑﺄﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺠﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻻﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻛﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑًﺎ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢.٢.١٠‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﻟﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪) ٦‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪.(OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.ON‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪ ٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪:OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪٤-١‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪OFF‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ON‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫‪˿ - ˾ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣϟ΍ϲϓιΎΧϟ΍έΛ΅ϣϟ΍ΡΎΗϔϣ‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪.(٢٢ .‬‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(٢١ .‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‬
‫‪ .١.١٠‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٦ - ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺮﺩ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ١٥± :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٨٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ١٥± :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٢,٥ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ١٥± :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ١٢ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ΰϳΰόΗ‬‬
‫·‪ϑΎόο‬‬
‫‪ .٢.١٠‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪ .OFF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ϝΧΩ‬‬
‫‪ΝέΧ‬‬
‫‪ϝϳρόΗϭ΃ϥϳϛϣΗ‬‬
‫‪έΎϳΗΧϼϟϝΑΎϗ‬‬
‫‪ϲΟέΎΧϕΎρϧ‬‬
‫‪ϡ΍ϭΩϟ΍ϰϠϋϥϳϛϣΗ‬‬
‫‪ϲϠΧ΍ΩϕΎρϧ‬‬
‫‪˽˺ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ϡ΍ϭΩϟ΍ϰϠϋϥϳϛϣΗ‬‬
‫‪˿ˬ˾ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ‬‬
‫‪ϝϳρόΗϭ΃ϥϳϛϣΗ‬‬
‫‪έΎϳΗΧϼϟϝΑΎϗ‬‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫·‪˻ˬ˺ϲϓΎο‬‬
‫‪ϪϠϳρόΗϥϛϣϳϻ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪ .٨.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪RC-03‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ RC-03‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪.MX-6224D‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ RC-03‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ RC-03‬ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫‪ΪόΑϦϋϢϜΤΘϟ΍ίΎϬΟ‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ STP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ UTP‬ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪ RJ-45‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪RC-03‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ STP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪٥‬‬
‫• ‪AWG 24‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ )ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪ ٩٣٫٨ :‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪/‬ﻛﻢ‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ‪ ،RC-03‬ﻭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪.RC-03‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ ١١٥‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ ٨٠‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ΓΩΣ΍ϭRC-03ΓΩΣϭϝϳλϭΗΩϧϋ‬‬
‫΃‬
‫΃ •˹˹˻‪ϡ‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫΃‪ΩΣ΍ϭϩΎΟΗ΍ ϡϭ΃˻˽ϥϣϝϗ‬‬
‫‪(:RC-03ϥϳΗΩΣϭϝϳλϭΗΩϧϋ‬‬
‫΃‬
‫‪Ώ‬‬
‫΃ ‪ϡ˺˺˾• Ώ‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫΃‪ΩΣ΍ϭϩΎΟΗ΍ ϡϭ΃˺˻ϥϣϝϗ‬‬
‫‪(:RC-03Ε΍ΩΣϭΙϼΛϝϳλϭΗΩϧϋ‬‬
‫‪Ν‬‬
‫΃‬
‫‪Ώ‬‬
‫΃ ‪ϡ́˹• Ν Ώ‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫΃‪ΩΣ΍ϭϩΎΟΗ΍ ϡϭ΃́ϥϣϝϗ‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫‪ .٦.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪ ٤٢‬ﺃﻭﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )‪ ٤٢‬ﺃﻭﻡ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ TOA‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(.٢١ .‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪BS-1030W ،BS-1030B :‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪TC-651M ،TC-631M :‬‬
‫·‪ΔϣϭΎϘϣϟ΍ϲϟΎϣΟ‬‬
‫˻˽΃‪ϰϠϋ΃ϭ΃ϡϭ‬‬
‫·‪ΔϣϭΎϘϣϟ΍ϲϟΎϣΟ‬‬
‫˻˽΃‪ϰϠϋ΃ϭ΃ϡϭ‬‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫‪ϲΟέΎΧϕΎρϧϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ϕϭΑϝϛηΑΔϋΎϣγ‬‬
‫‪ϲϠΧ΍ΩϕΎρϧ‬‬
‫‪ΔϳϗϭΩϧλΔϋΎϣγ‬‬
‫‪ .٧.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪ (.٢١ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ϲΟέΎΧϕΎρϧ‬‬
‫‪ΔϋΎϣγ‬‬
‫‪P-2240‬‬
‫‪Εϭλϟ΍ϡΧοϣΔϗΎρ‬‬
‫‪ϲϠΧ΍ΩϕΎρϧ‬‬
‫‪P-2240‬‬
‫‪ΔϋΎϣγ‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪ .٤.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪F-1300B‬‬
‫‪Δϴδϴ΋ήϟ΍ϢϜΤΘϟ΍ΔϋΎϤγ‬‬
‫‪A-2030‬‬
‫‪ΕϮμϟ΍ϢΨπϤΑϲΗϮμϟ΍ΝίΎϤϟ΍ίΎϬΟ‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻼ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ DP-SP3‬ﻣﻦ ‪ TOA‬ﻛﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪.(٢١ .‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ ،DP-SP3‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.DP-SP3‬‬
‫‪ϲϠΧ΍ΩϕΎρϧϠϟ‬‬
‫‪ϲΟέΎΧϕΎρϧϠϟ‬‬
‫‪ϝΧΩϣ ΝέΧϣ‬‬
‫‪ΝέΧϣ ϝΧΩϣ‬‬
‫‪DP-SP3Δϳϣϗέϟ΍ΔϋΎϣγϟ΍ΞϟΎόϣ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ OFF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪.DP-SP3‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ،OFF‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ΔϋΎϣγϟ΍ϝΩΎόϣ‬‬
‫‪ONϝϳϐηΗ‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫·‪OFFϕϼϏ‬‬
‫‪ .٢.٩‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .١.٢.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﻴﻦ ‪ .RCA‬ﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫·‪ΔϴΟέΎΨϟ΍ΔϴϓΎοϹ΍Ε΍ΰϴϬΠΘϟ΍ϰϟ‬‬
‫‪ .٢.٢.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺝ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Φϟ·ˬϰϘϴγϮϤϟ΍Ϟϐθϣ‬‬
‫‪ .٣.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪ .(١٩ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ،OFF‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪ ٦‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ήΛΆϤϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ΝήΨϣ‬‬
‫‪ϞΧΪϣ‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺰﺝ‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪ .٣.١.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪٦ - ٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪.٦ - ٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪ XLR‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٦ - ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪.٦ - ٢‬‬
‫‪ρϟϭϓ˻˽+‬‬
‫‪ϡϭΗϧΎϔϟ΍ΔϗΎρ‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪ XLR‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪،٦ - ٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺪ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪˿ - ˻ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ‬‬
‫‪ϡϭΗϧΎϔϟ΍ΡΎΗϔϣ‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٦٦- :٤ - ٢‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٦٠- :٦ - ٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫–‬
‫‪˽ - ˻ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ،٤ - ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪˿ˬ˾ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ[‬
‫]ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ[‬
‫‪ΔϤ΋΍Ϊϟ΍ΔϴΒτϘϟΎΑϒΜϜϤϟ΍Ε΍ΫΕΎϧϮϓϭήϜϴϤϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ONϞϴϐθΗ‬‬
‫‪ONϞϴϐθΗ‬‬
‫·‪OFFϕϼϏ‬‬
‫‪DM-1300‬‬
‫‪ϲϜϴϣΎϨϳΪϟ΍ϥϮϓϭήϜϴϤϟ΍‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪DM-1300‬‬
‫‪DM-1300‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ،٦‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ΔϴϜϴϣΎϨϳΪϟ΍ΕΎϧϮϓϭήϜϴϤϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ϲϜϴϣΎϨϳΪϟ΍ϥϮϓϭήϜϴϤϟ΍‬‬
‫·‪OFFϕϼϏ‬‬
‫‪ .١.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ OFF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ON‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ .OFF‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ OFF‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻗﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ،١‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .١.١.٩‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪:‬‬
‫@‪> έϛΫϣ XLRωϭϧϟ΍ϥϣϝλϭϣ‬‬
‫@‪>ϑΗΎϬϟ΍αΑϘϣ‬‬
‫‡‪ϥί΍ϭΗϣϟ΍έϳϏί΍έρϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ϲοέ΃ΔΑϠΟ‬‬
‫‪ϥΧΎγ˻αϭΑΩ‬‬
‫‡‪ϥί΍ϭΗϣϟ΍ί΍έρϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ϲοέ΃ΔΑϠΟ‬‬
‫‪ϲοέ΃˺αϭΑΩ‬‬
‫‪ΩέΎΑ˼αϭΑΩ‬‬
‫‪ϥΧΎγα΃έ‬‬
‫‪ϥΧΎγα΃έ‬‬
‫‪ΩέΎΑΔϘϠΣ‬‬
‫‪ .٢.١.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺪ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ ‪ TOA‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪.EM-410‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ٦٠- :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‬
‫* ‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ = ‪ ١‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ‬
‫]ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ[‬
‫]ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ[‬
‫‪EM-410‬‬
‫‪ΔϤ΋΍Ϊϟ΍ΔϴΒτϘϟΎΑϒΜϜϤϟ΍ϭΫϥϮϓϭήϜϴϤϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ONϞϴϐθΗ‬‬
‫·‪OFFϕϼϏ‬‬
‫‪DM-1300‬‬
‫‪ϲϜϴϣΎϨϳΪϟ΍ϥϮϓϭήϜϴϤϟ΍‬‬
‫‪ONϞϴϐθΗ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪.١‬‬
‫·‪OFFϕϼϏ‬‬
‫‪ρϟϭϓ˻˽+‬‬
‫‪ϡϭΗϧΎϔϟ΍ΔϗΎρ‬‬
‫‪˺ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ‬‬
‫‪ϡϭΗϧΎϔϟ΍ΡΎΗϔϣ‬‬
‫‪+ +‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ OFF‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ )ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(١٦ .‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(١٣ .‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(١٨ .‬‬
‫΃‪ϭ‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(١٧ .‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(١٧ .‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(١٥ .‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(١٥ .‬‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺹ‪(١٦ .‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬.٨
F-1300B
Δϳγϳ΋έϟ΍ϡϛΣΗϟ΍ΔϋΎϣγ
ϭ΃ OFFϕϼϏϹ΍ϊοϭϰϠϋϡϭΗϧΎϔϟ΍ΡΎΗϔϣ DM-1300
ONϝϳϐηΗϟ΍ϊοϭϰϠϋϡϭΗϧΎϔϟ΍ΡΎΗϔϣ EM-410
ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ
A-2030
Εϭλϟ΍ϡΧοϣΑϲΗϭλϟ΍ΝίΎϣϟ΍ίΎϬΟ
DM-1300
ΕΎϧϭϓϭέϛϳϣϟ΍
ΔϳϛϳϣΎϧϳΩϟ΍
RC-03
Δϳγϳ΋έϟ΍Εϼλϭϣϟ΍ϰϟ·
ΩΩέΗϣϟ΍έΎϳΗϠϟ
MX-6224D
ϭ΃
RC-03
RC-03
ΩόΑϥϋϡϛΣΗϟ΍ίΎϬΟ
P-2240
Εϭλϟ΍ϡΧοϣΔϗΎρ
DM-1300
ΕΎϧϭϓϭέϛϳϣϟ΍
ΔϳϛϳϣΎϧϳΩϟ΍
BS-1030B
˽ΩΩϋΔϳϗϭΩϧλΔϋΎϣγ
P-2240
TC-631M
˽ΩΩϋϕϭΑϝϛηΑΔϋΎϣγ
ϝΟγϣϟ΍
CDΕΎϧ΍ϭργ΍ϝϐηϣϭ΃ϭϳΩ΍έϟ΍ϑϟ΍ϭϣ
[‫]ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
έΛ΅ϣϟ΍
ϝΧΩϣ
MX-6224D
ΝέΧϣ ϝΧΩϣ
DP-SP3
ΔϋΎϣγϟ΍ΞϟΎόϣ
١١
ϝΧΩϣ ΝέΧϣ
ΝέΧϣ
‫‪ .٢.٧‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪RC-03‬‬
‫]ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ[‬
‫˺‬
‫]ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ[‬
‫˻‬
‫̀‬
‫́‬
‫˼‬
‫˽‬
‫˾‬
‫˿‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.RJ-45‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.MX-6224D‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ STP CAT 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ UTP‬ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪.RJ-45‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ MX-6224D‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.ON‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣١‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ .١‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ :OFF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺍﺑﺪﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ TS‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ )ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ (٣) ١‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ّ .‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣٢‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣٣‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ]ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ[‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻧﻚ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫‪ M4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣٤‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ]ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ[‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻧﻚ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫‪ M4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣٥‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ RC-03‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣٦‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٦٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪RCA‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣٧‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٦٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪) RCA‬ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣٨‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٦٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪) RCA‬ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣٩‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ١٠ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ‬‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ‪) RCA‬ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR) ٦ - ٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ XLR‬ﻟﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪.٦ - ٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ XLR‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ :OFF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ (٣) ٦ - ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ّ .‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤١‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪/٦‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪XLR‬‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٦٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴًﺎ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ XLR‬ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ،XLR‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”‪ .٤٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪.“(XLR) ٦ - ٢‬‬
‫* ‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ = ‪ ١‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )‪ ،(١٦‬ﻭﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻹﺿﻌﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺸﺘﺮﻁ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫‪ .١٦‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ”ﻗﺒﺔ“ ﻭ”ﻗﺎﻋﺔ“ ﻭ”ﻟﻮﺣﺔ“‬
‫ﻭ”ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٧‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ‪/‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ”‪) “S‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻭ ”‪) “M‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻭ ”‪) “L‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ،OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٨‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٠‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ١٠ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣,٥‬ﻣﻢ )‪ :3P‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٢‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻮﻕ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ‪.TOA TC-631M/651M‬‬
‫‪ .٢٣‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٩‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪٦ - ٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .٢٤‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ON‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٥‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ‪.TOA BS-1030B/1030W‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ[‬
‫˺˼‬
‫̂˻‬
‫˹˼‬
‫˺˽‬
‫́˻‬
‫˹˽ ̂˼ ́˼ ̀˼‬
‫‪ .٢٦‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٧‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٨‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ١٠ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ‪RCA‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٩‬ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪/٤ - ٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪XLR‬‬
‫‪ ٦٦‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ*‪ ٢٠٠ ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴًﺎ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ XLR‬ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫̀˻‬
‫˿˼ ˾˼‬
‫˿˻‬
‫˽˼‬
‫˼˼‬
‫˻˼‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ،XLR‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”‪ .٤٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪“.(XLR) ٦ - ٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣٠‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ* )‪ ٢٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ(‪ ٦٠-/‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ* ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ٦٠٠ ،(OFF‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٦,٣‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”‪ .٣١‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪.“١‬‬
‫* ‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ = ‪ ١‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪ .١.٧‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺯﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ MX-6224D‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٤٠x٢‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫]ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ[‬
‫‪˻Ò‬‬
‫‪ÓÓ‬‬
‫˺˺ ‪̂Ë‬‬
‫‪ÓÔ ˺Ó‬‬
‫˹˺ ‪́Ì‬‬
‫̀ ˿‬
‫˼‬
‫˾ ˽‬
‫˾˻ ˽˻ ˼˻ ˻˻ ˺˻‬
‫˹˻ ̂˺ ́˺ ̀˺ ˿˺ ˾˺‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫˽˺‬
‫˼˺‬
‫˻˺‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ )‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪ ٢٠-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ(‪.‬‬‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪ ٨٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻌﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ )‪ ٢,٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻌﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .١٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ ١٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻌﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .١٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﻡ‪ °‬ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ ‪) ٪٨٠‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﻠﻨﺪﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻷﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﻭﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫΃‪ϡγ˺˹ϥϣέΛϛ‬‬
‫΃‪ϡγ˺˹ϥϣέΛϛ‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫΃‪ϡγ˺˹ϥϣέΛϛ‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬.٤
DM-1300
ΔϳϛϳϣΎϧϳΩϟ΍ΕΎϧϭϓϭέϛϳϣϟ΍
EM-410
ϑΛϛϣϟ΍ϭΫϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣϟ΍
Δϣ΋΍Ωϟ΍ΔϳΑρϘϟΎΑ
Δϳγϳ΋έϟ΍Εϼλϭϣϟ΍ϰϟ·
ΩΩέΗϣϟ΍έΎϳΗϠϟ
MX-6224D
CDΕΎϧ΍ϭργ΍ϝϐηϣ
DM-1300
ΔϳϛϳϣΎϧϳΩϟ΍ΕΎϧϭϓϭέϛϳϣϟ΍
BS-1030B
˽ΩΩϋΔϳϗϭΩϧλΔϋΎϣγ
TC-631M
˽ΩΩϋϕϭΑϝϛηΑΔϋΎϣγ
.‫ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﻱ‬٦ - ٥ ‫ ﻭ‬٤ - ٢ ‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
ϲϟΎϋϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣϝϣΎΣϰϠϋϪΑϳϛέΗΑϡϗ˻ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ
˿ϭ˾ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ
ωΎϔΗέϻ΍ργϭΗϣϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣϝϣΎΣϰϠϋϪΑϳϛέΗΑϡϗ˼ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ
νϔΧϧϣϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣϝϣΎΣϰϠϋϪΑϳϛέΗΑϡϗ˽ϥϭϓϭέϛϳϣ
٥
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺒﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺄﻳﺪﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻟﺴﺤﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻐﺒﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ّ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫· ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫· ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫· ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ OFF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ON‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪ .OFF‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ OFF‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻗﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ،١‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ RC-03‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪.MX-6224D‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﻛﻴﻞ ‪ TOA‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺯﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MX-6224D‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ ﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MX-6224D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ RC-03‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (ON/OFF‬ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺪﺧﻠﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ BS-1030‬ﻭ ‪TC-631M/651M‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ )‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪RC-03‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻵﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺟﺮﻭﺡ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻲء ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺮﻭﺡ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻲء ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺟﺮﻭﺡ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺷﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻻ ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ‪ --‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ‪ --‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ‬
‫ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻬﺎﻟﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺟﺮﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ‪ TOA‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫·‬
‫·‬
‫·‬
‫·‬
‫·‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺻﺪﻙ ﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻛﺴﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ )ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺠﻮء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﻮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺍﻧﺴﻜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫‪٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪٥ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١١ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪.......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .١.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪.....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٢.٩‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪........................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٣.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٤.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٥.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪.......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٦.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ‪..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٧.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪.................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٨.٩‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪................................................................ RC-03‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ‪........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .١.١٠‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٢.١٠‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ‪.............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٣.١٠‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ‪....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .١.١١‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ‪.......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٢.١١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .٣.١١‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪................................................ OFF‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ‪٢٦ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪٢٧ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .١٤‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫‪.١٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪٧ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .١.٧‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺯﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ MX-6224D‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٤٠x٢‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪٧ ...................‬‬
‫‪ .٢.٧‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪١٠ ............................................................................ RC-03‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫‪٦ ...........................................................‬‬
‫‪٢٨ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٢٩ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .١٦‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻸﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪٣٠ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٣٠ ........................................................................................... MX-6224D .١.١٦‬‬
‫‪٣٠ .................................................................................................. RC-03 .٢.١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺯﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٤٠x٢‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫‪RC-03‬‬
‫‪MX-6224D‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺯﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ٢٤٠x٢‬ﻭﺍﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪.TOA‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ٍ‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising